77
Splinting, Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices. A GUIDE FOR EDUCATION & COMPETENCY Compiled by: Wendy Porteous

Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

buat yang butuh

Citation preview

Page 1: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and

Devices

A GUIDE FOR EDUCATION amp COMPETENCY

Compiled by Wendy Porteous

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thank you to Pat Standen and Di Woods for reviewing the document and providing their expert advice and Ambulance Victoria for so generously allowing their clinical practice guidelines to be used as a guide For information regarding this Guide contact Pat Standen Department of Human Services PO Box 712 Ballarat 3353 Email patstandendhsvicgovau Phone 03 5333 6026 httpwwwdhsvicgovauregionalgrampians Version Date Major Changes Page No 10 April 2009 Front page image sourced from - httpwwwwebweavernuclipartimgpeoplemenbandaged-mangif DISCLAIMER Care has been taken to confirm the accuracy of the information presented in this guide however the authors editors and publisher are not responsible for errors or omissions or for any consequences from application of the information in the guide and make no warranty express or implied with respect to the contents of the publication Every effort has been made to ensure the clinical information provided is in accordance with current recommendations and practice However in view of ongoing research changes in government regulations and the flow of other information the information is provided on the basis that all persons undertake responsibility for assessing the relevance and accuracy of its content

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 2 Version 1 2009

The purpose of this guide is to assist educators in the Grampians Region to design their own Health Service specific package for Registered Nurses Division 1 amp 2 required to manage patients in an emergency situation The aim of this guide is to provide generic information based on principles of care It is the responsibility of each individual practitioner and Health Service to ensure appropriate education for all equipment and that competency in the use of the equipment is maintained The following package will review the relevant anatomy and physiology that is required for an understanding of the practice of splinting and bandaging It will then cover what is commonly in clinical practice and why as well as looking at the ldquomachineryrdquo of splinting Although splinting and bandaging can be used in a variety of clinical settings this package will primarily focus on their use in acute musculoskeletal injuries related to the extremities

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 3 Version 1 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTIONhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 Overview Anatomy and Physiologyhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip7 Stages of healinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 Musculoskeletal tissuehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip11 Soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip12 Principles of managementhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip13 Types of soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip14 Strains and sprainshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Dislocations and subluxationshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Fractureshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 General principles of splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Indications contraindications and cautionshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip20 Soft Non-rigid splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip22 Other general use rigid and semi-rigid splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip30 Semi-rigid formable splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip32 Traction splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip41 Pelvic slingsplintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip53 Clinical Practice Guidelines and competencieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip64 References and suggested further readinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip76

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 4 Version 1 2009

Introduction Splinting and bandaging plays an important role in the management of

musculoskeletal injuries and for definitive therapy of soft tissue injuries

particularly those involving extremity fractures and joint dislocations Splinting

may be the definitive treatment or a temporising measure until the time of re-

evaluation andor casting

Immobilisation facilitates the healing process by decreasing pain and

protecting the extremity from further injury Other benefits of splinting are

specific to the particular injury or the problem that is being treated For

example in the treatment of fractures splinting helps maintain bony

alignment Splinting deep lacerations that cross joints reduces tension on the

wound and helps prevent wound dehiscence Immobilising tendon lacerations

may facilitate the healing process by relieving stress on the repaired tendon

The discomfort of inflammatory disorders such as tenosynovitis is greatly

reduced by immobilisation Deep space infections of the hands or feet as well

as cellulitis over any joint should similarly be immobilised for comfort Limiting

early motion also may reduce oedema and theoretically improve the immune

systemrsquos ability to combat infection Hence puncture wounds and animal bites

of the hands and feet may be immobilised until the risk of infection has

passed Splinting large abrasions that cross joint surfaces prevents movement

of the injured extremity and reduces the pain that is produced when the

injured skin is stretched Patients with multiple trauma should have fractures

and reduced dislocations adequately splinted while other diagnostic and

therapeutic procedures are completed Immobilisation decreases blood loss

minimizes the potential for further neurovascular injury decreases the need

for analgesia and may decrease the risk of fat emboli from long bone

fractures

The primary objective of splinting is to prevent motion of fractured bone

fragments or dislocated joints and thereby to prevent the following

complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 5 Version 1 2009

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 2: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thank you to Pat Standen and Di Woods for reviewing the document and providing their expert advice and Ambulance Victoria for so generously allowing their clinical practice guidelines to be used as a guide For information regarding this Guide contact Pat Standen Department of Human Services PO Box 712 Ballarat 3353 Email patstandendhsvicgovau Phone 03 5333 6026 httpwwwdhsvicgovauregionalgrampians Version Date Major Changes Page No 10 April 2009 Front page image sourced from - httpwwwwebweavernuclipartimgpeoplemenbandaged-mangif DISCLAIMER Care has been taken to confirm the accuracy of the information presented in this guide however the authors editors and publisher are not responsible for errors or omissions or for any consequences from application of the information in the guide and make no warranty express or implied with respect to the contents of the publication Every effort has been made to ensure the clinical information provided is in accordance with current recommendations and practice However in view of ongoing research changes in government regulations and the flow of other information the information is provided on the basis that all persons undertake responsibility for assessing the relevance and accuracy of its content

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 2 Version 1 2009

The purpose of this guide is to assist educators in the Grampians Region to design their own Health Service specific package for Registered Nurses Division 1 amp 2 required to manage patients in an emergency situation The aim of this guide is to provide generic information based on principles of care It is the responsibility of each individual practitioner and Health Service to ensure appropriate education for all equipment and that competency in the use of the equipment is maintained The following package will review the relevant anatomy and physiology that is required for an understanding of the practice of splinting and bandaging It will then cover what is commonly in clinical practice and why as well as looking at the ldquomachineryrdquo of splinting Although splinting and bandaging can be used in a variety of clinical settings this package will primarily focus on their use in acute musculoskeletal injuries related to the extremities

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 3 Version 1 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTIONhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 Overview Anatomy and Physiologyhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip7 Stages of healinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 Musculoskeletal tissuehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip11 Soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip12 Principles of managementhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip13 Types of soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip14 Strains and sprainshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Dislocations and subluxationshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Fractureshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 General principles of splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Indications contraindications and cautionshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip20 Soft Non-rigid splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip22 Other general use rigid and semi-rigid splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip30 Semi-rigid formable splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip32 Traction splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip41 Pelvic slingsplintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip53 Clinical Practice Guidelines and competencieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip64 References and suggested further readinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip76

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 4 Version 1 2009

Introduction Splinting and bandaging plays an important role in the management of

musculoskeletal injuries and for definitive therapy of soft tissue injuries

particularly those involving extremity fractures and joint dislocations Splinting

may be the definitive treatment or a temporising measure until the time of re-

evaluation andor casting

Immobilisation facilitates the healing process by decreasing pain and

protecting the extremity from further injury Other benefits of splinting are

specific to the particular injury or the problem that is being treated For

example in the treatment of fractures splinting helps maintain bony

alignment Splinting deep lacerations that cross joints reduces tension on the

wound and helps prevent wound dehiscence Immobilising tendon lacerations

may facilitate the healing process by relieving stress on the repaired tendon

The discomfort of inflammatory disorders such as tenosynovitis is greatly

reduced by immobilisation Deep space infections of the hands or feet as well

as cellulitis over any joint should similarly be immobilised for comfort Limiting

early motion also may reduce oedema and theoretically improve the immune

systemrsquos ability to combat infection Hence puncture wounds and animal bites

of the hands and feet may be immobilised until the risk of infection has

passed Splinting large abrasions that cross joint surfaces prevents movement

of the injured extremity and reduces the pain that is produced when the

injured skin is stretched Patients with multiple trauma should have fractures

and reduced dislocations adequately splinted while other diagnostic and

therapeutic procedures are completed Immobilisation decreases blood loss

minimizes the potential for further neurovascular injury decreases the need

for analgesia and may decrease the risk of fat emboli from long bone

fractures

The primary objective of splinting is to prevent motion of fractured bone

fragments or dislocated joints and thereby to prevent the following

complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 5 Version 1 2009

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 3: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

The purpose of this guide is to assist educators in the Grampians Region to design their own Health Service specific package for Registered Nurses Division 1 amp 2 required to manage patients in an emergency situation The aim of this guide is to provide generic information based on principles of care It is the responsibility of each individual practitioner and Health Service to ensure appropriate education for all equipment and that competency in the use of the equipment is maintained The following package will review the relevant anatomy and physiology that is required for an understanding of the practice of splinting and bandaging It will then cover what is commonly in clinical practice and why as well as looking at the ldquomachineryrdquo of splinting Although splinting and bandaging can be used in a variety of clinical settings this package will primarily focus on their use in acute musculoskeletal injuries related to the extremities

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 3 Version 1 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTIONhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 Overview Anatomy and Physiologyhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip7 Stages of healinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 Musculoskeletal tissuehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip11 Soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip12 Principles of managementhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip13 Types of soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip14 Strains and sprainshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Dislocations and subluxationshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Fractureshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 General principles of splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Indications contraindications and cautionshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip20 Soft Non-rigid splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip22 Other general use rigid and semi-rigid splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip30 Semi-rigid formable splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip32 Traction splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip41 Pelvic slingsplintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip53 Clinical Practice Guidelines and competencieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip64 References and suggested further readinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip76

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 4 Version 1 2009

Introduction Splinting and bandaging plays an important role in the management of

musculoskeletal injuries and for definitive therapy of soft tissue injuries

particularly those involving extremity fractures and joint dislocations Splinting

may be the definitive treatment or a temporising measure until the time of re-

evaluation andor casting

Immobilisation facilitates the healing process by decreasing pain and

protecting the extremity from further injury Other benefits of splinting are

specific to the particular injury or the problem that is being treated For

example in the treatment of fractures splinting helps maintain bony

alignment Splinting deep lacerations that cross joints reduces tension on the

wound and helps prevent wound dehiscence Immobilising tendon lacerations

may facilitate the healing process by relieving stress on the repaired tendon

The discomfort of inflammatory disorders such as tenosynovitis is greatly

reduced by immobilisation Deep space infections of the hands or feet as well

as cellulitis over any joint should similarly be immobilised for comfort Limiting

early motion also may reduce oedema and theoretically improve the immune

systemrsquos ability to combat infection Hence puncture wounds and animal bites

of the hands and feet may be immobilised until the risk of infection has

passed Splinting large abrasions that cross joint surfaces prevents movement

of the injured extremity and reduces the pain that is produced when the

injured skin is stretched Patients with multiple trauma should have fractures

and reduced dislocations adequately splinted while other diagnostic and

therapeutic procedures are completed Immobilisation decreases blood loss

minimizes the potential for further neurovascular injury decreases the need

for analgesia and may decrease the risk of fat emboli from long bone

fractures

The primary objective of splinting is to prevent motion of fractured bone

fragments or dislocated joints and thereby to prevent the following

complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 5 Version 1 2009

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 4: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTIONhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 Overview Anatomy and Physiologyhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip7 Stages of healinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 Musculoskeletal tissuehelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip11 Soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip12 Principles of managementhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip13 Types of soft tissue injurieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip14 Strains and sprainshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Dislocations and subluxationshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 Fractureshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip16 General principles of splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Indications contraindications and cautionshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip19 Splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip20 Soft Non-rigid splintinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip22 Other general use rigid and semi-rigid splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip30 Semi-rigid formable splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip32 Traction splintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip41 Pelvic slingsplintshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip53 Clinical Practice Guidelines and competencieshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip64 References and suggested further readinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip76

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 4 Version 1 2009

Introduction Splinting and bandaging plays an important role in the management of

musculoskeletal injuries and for definitive therapy of soft tissue injuries

particularly those involving extremity fractures and joint dislocations Splinting

may be the definitive treatment or a temporising measure until the time of re-

evaluation andor casting

Immobilisation facilitates the healing process by decreasing pain and

protecting the extremity from further injury Other benefits of splinting are

specific to the particular injury or the problem that is being treated For

example in the treatment of fractures splinting helps maintain bony

alignment Splinting deep lacerations that cross joints reduces tension on the

wound and helps prevent wound dehiscence Immobilising tendon lacerations

may facilitate the healing process by relieving stress on the repaired tendon

The discomfort of inflammatory disorders such as tenosynovitis is greatly

reduced by immobilisation Deep space infections of the hands or feet as well

as cellulitis over any joint should similarly be immobilised for comfort Limiting

early motion also may reduce oedema and theoretically improve the immune

systemrsquos ability to combat infection Hence puncture wounds and animal bites

of the hands and feet may be immobilised until the risk of infection has

passed Splinting large abrasions that cross joint surfaces prevents movement

of the injured extremity and reduces the pain that is produced when the

injured skin is stretched Patients with multiple trauma should have fractures

and reduced dislocations adequately splinted while other diagnostic and

therapeutic procedures are completed Immobilisation decreases blood loss

minimizes the potential for further neurovascular injury decreases the need

for analgesia and may decrease the risk of fat emboli from long bone

fractures

The primary objective of splinting is to prevent motion of fractured bone

fragments or dislocated joints and thereby to prevent the following

complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 5 Version 1 2009

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 5: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Introduction Splinting and bandaging plays an important role in the management of

musculoskeletal injuries and for definitive therapy of soft tissue injuries

particularly those involving extremity fractures and joint dislocations Splinting

may be the definitive treatment or a temporising measure until the time of re-

evaluation andor casting

Immobilisation facilitates the healing process by decreasing pain and

protecting the extremity from further injury Other benefits of splinting are

specific to the particular injury or the problem that is being treated For

example in the treatment of fractures splinting helps maintain bony

alignment Splinting deep lacerations that cross joints reduces tension on the

wound and helps prevent wound dehiscence Immobilising tendon lacerations

may facilitate the healing process by relieving stress on the repaired tendon

The discomfort of inflammatory disorders such as tenosynovitis is greatly

reduced by immobilisation Deep space infections of the hands or feet as well

as cellulitis over any joint should similarly be immobilised for comfort Limiting

early motion also may reduce oedema and theoretically improve the immune

systemrsquos ability to combat infection Hence puncture wounds and animal bites

of the hands and feet may be immobilised until the risk of infection has

passed Splinting large abrasions that cross joint surfaces prevents movement

of the injured extremity and reduces the pain that is produced when the

injured skin is stretched Patients with multiple trauma should have fractures

and reduced dislocations adequately splinted while other diagnostic and

therapeutic procedures are completed Immobilisation decreases blood loss

minimizes the potential for further neurovascular injury decreases the need

for analgesia and may decrease the risk of fat emboli from long bone

fractures

The primary objective of splinting is to prevent motion of fractured bone

fragments or dislocated joints and thereby to prevent the following

complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 5 Version 1 2009

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 6: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

1 Laceration of the skin by broken bones which will increase the risk of

contamination and infection

2 Damage to local blood vessels causing excessive bleeding into

surrounding tissue ischaemia and even tissue death

3 Restriction of blood flow to an area as a result of pressure of bone

ends on blood vessels

4 Damage to nerves by inadvertent excessive traction contusion or

laceration resulting in possible permanent loss of sensation and

paralysis

5 Damage to muscles with subsequent necrosis scarring and

permanent disability

6 Increased pain associated with movement of bone ends

7 Shock

8 Delayed union or non-union of fractured bones or dislocated joints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 6 Version 1 2009

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 7: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Anatomy and Physiology Extremity injuries although common rarely pose an immediate threat to life

Extremity trauma can be life threatening when it produces severe blood loss

either externally or from internal bleeding to the extremity Extremity trauma

can also be limb threatening ie it can result in the loss of a limb or function

of a limb

The mature human body has approximately 206 bones These bones provide

the architectural framework for the body

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 7

Version 1 2009

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 8: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Other structures such as tendons cartilage ligaments soft tissue and muscle

allow the bones to perform many functions such as support serving as a

reservoir for minerals and haemopoietic function (production of red blood

cells) shielding internal organs and activities such as protection work and

play which are coordinated by involuntary and voluntary muscle movement

Bone is dynamic and can adapt itself when forces are applied to it Bones can

be grouped based on shape such as flat (innominate ndash pelvis) cuboidal

(vertebrae) or long (tibia) Furthermore bones can be classified as cancellous

(spongy or trabecular bone) or cortical (compact) Cortical bone is found

where support matters most in shafts of long bones and outer walls of other

bones Cancellous bone is lsquohoneycombrsquo in appearance and makes up the

internal network of all bones

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 8 Version 1 2009

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 9: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Periosteum surrounds bone and contains a substantial network of blood

vessels that supply the bone with blood and nutrients Inside the long bones

of the extremity is the medullary cavity containing yellow marrow (mostly fat)

and red marrow (responsible for blood cell production) Therefore when a

long bone is fractured blood loss occurs and fat can be released from the

medullary cavity potentially causing fat embolism

Injuries to the soft tissue which includes muscle skin and subcutaneous fat

can occur in combination with fractures Sometimes soft tissue injuries are

more significant and have more serious ramifications than the fracture itself

Healing of an uncomplicated fracture may take from 6 weeks to 6 months

Vascular compromise infection and other injuries may lengthen the healing

process and in some cases non-union may occur

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 9

Version 1 2009

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 10: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

The five stages of fracture healing do not occur independently but overlap as

progression of the healing process occurs

Stages of fracture healing Stage Description Length I Haematoma Immediately following fracture bone ends rub together - 1-3 days Formation called crepitus ndash causing pain Amount of haematoma

Depends on the damage to bone soft tissue and vessels around the fracture

II Granulation Granulation tissue forms after fibroblasts osteoclasts and 3 days - and chondroblasts invade the haematoma as part of the 2 weeks inflammatory sequelae Osteoclasts remove dead bone and osteoblasts produce bone III Callus The fracture becomes lsquostickyrsquo due to plasma and white Formation blood cells entering the granulation tissue This 2-6 weeks material assists in keeping bone fragments together Parathyroid hormone increases and calcium is deposited This is the most important stage slowing or interruption at this stage means that the last two stages cannot progress leading to delayed healing or non-union IV Ossification Osteoblasts and connective tissue are prolific bringing Consolidation the bone ends together Bridging callus envelops the fracture fragment ends and moves towards the other 3 weeks - fragments Medullary callus bridges the fracture 6 months fragments internally thus creating a connection with the marrow cavity and cortices of the fracture fragment Trabecular bone replaces callus along the stress lines Unnecessary callus is absorbed Bony union is thus achieved V Remodelling Re-establishment of the medullary canal Fragments of bone are united Surplus cells are absorbed bone 6 weeks - is remodelled and healing is complete 1 year

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 10

Version 1 2009

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 11: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Musculoskeletal tissue There are two types of tissue in the musculoskeletal system muscle and

connective tissue Connective tissue is specified as tendon fascia ligaments

and cartilage

Skeletal Muscle

Skeletal muscle tissue is a voluntary muscle and has a unique ability to

contract therefore providing the body with the ability to move Skeletal muscle

has high metabolic demands and is provided with a rich blood supply by

arteries and veins that penetrate the epimysium (fascia) and are finally

embedded in the innermost sheath the endomysium

Muscles are enclosed within fascial compartments which protect the muscle

from damaged tissue swelling Pressure within the compartment can increase

so much that muscle ischaemia occurs resulting in compartment syndrome

Nerve Supply ndash One or two nerves supply muscle Each nerve includes

efferent (motor) and afferent (sensory) fibres Nerves provide movement and

sensation Sensory nerves carry impulses to the central nervous system

(CNS) Motor nerves carry impulses away from the CNS Traction

compression ischaemia laceration oedema or burning can damage nerves

resulting in nerve deficit distal to the site of injury

Vascular Supply ndash The nutrient artery provides bone marrow and some cortex

in adult long bones with a rich blood supply The large ends of long bones are

supplied by circulus vasculosus

Because of the close proximity of nerves and vessels to bony structures any

musculoskeletal injury can potentially cause vascular andor neurological

compromise This is a result of these systems being extremely sensitive to

compression and impaired circulation If vascular supply is impaired tissue

perfusion is reduced and ultimately will lead to ischaemia Irreversible damage

to nerves vascular structures and muscles can occur within 6 to 8 hours if

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 11 Version 1 2009

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 12: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

progression from ischaemia to muscle necrosis occurs Poor arterial perfusion

is evidenced by pallor and cyanosis is suggestive of venous congestion

Improper handling of fractures can complicate further care of the patient and

increase the degree of injury as well as causing further bleeding pain

increased incidence of fat embolism and further damage to soft tissues

nerves and vessels

Soft Tissue Injuries Typically musculoskeletal trauma results in injury to both soft tissue and

bone activating the sequelae of wound healing and fracture repair Evidence

suggests that delay or prevention of fracture healing can be directly linked to

extensive soft tissue injuries

Soft tissue injuries incorporate many structures namely blood vessels

nerves muscle skin ligaments and tendons Contusions blistering burns

and crushed areas of skin are an indication of a transfer of a large amount of

energy Major contamination from grass soil or other foreign material should

be removed if accessible Copious lavage with sterile saline should be used in

grossly contaminated wounds before a sterile dressing is applied Where

applicable the limb should be splinted in normal alignment

Mechanism of soft tissue injury Degloving - a shearing force resulting in soft tissue being stripped away from

the bone It can affect a small area or entire limb

Penetrating penetrating objects such as bullets knives or fracture ends can

completely divide blood vessels causing vascular damage

Tension tension forces result when the skin is struck by a blunt object This

causes the skin to be torn away from its subcutaneous base which can

produce avulsions or lacerations

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 12 Version 1 2009

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 13: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Compressioncrushing tissues can be crushed between an object and

underlying bone which can produce significant devitalisation of tissue

Compression forces on blood vessels can cause intimal damage rupture and

sometimes sever the vessels completely Spasm can result following intimal

damage

Stretching skin can be stretched at the moment of impact and the damaged

skin may perish Fracture blisters can result from transient ischaemia of the

skin Fracture blisters develop within 48 hours of injury which in turn

complicates internal fixation as they are a potential source of infection Blood

vessels can be stretched when a bone is fractured and this can cause intimal

damage to the vessel which is common near the knee or elbow

Injection injury although not common this is a serious injury generally to the

handdigit Such injuries are caused by accidental high-pressure injection of

grease water solvent or paint Devitalisation of tissue is immediate and

extensive tissue destruction can lead to necrosis within 48 hours if left

untreated

Human bites although relatively rare are serious injuries particularly if they

involve tendons joints or ligaments in the hand lsquoFist fightsrsquo can produce

wounds around the knuckles if they come into contact with teeth When the

anaerobe from a tooth is sealed into a joint or around the capsule serious

infection develops which can lead to destruction of the joint and stiffness The

human mouth is a veritable reservoir of bacteria If left untreated these bites

can become grossly infected with a myriad of organisms

Principles of management Elevation elevating a limb in a non-dependent position (on pillow or frame no

higher than the level of the heart) will assist in improving venous return and

reducing oedema Over elevation can contribute to poor venous return and

associated complications

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 13

Version 1 2009

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 14: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Cooling (cryotherapy) should be concurrent with elevation Cooling is

accepted as a fundamental part of acute soft tissue injury treatment By

reducing tissue temperature cryotherapy can decrease pain and metabolic

processes thereby minimising inflammation Assess the patient at regular

intervals to monitor for signs of potential thermal injury resulting from cooling

therapy Generally cooling therapy is applied for a duration of 10 to 30

minutes every 1 to 3 hours for the first 24 to 48 hours

Protection splinting of a joint can control pain and reduce further injury to soft

tissue by decreasing movement

Types of soft tissue injuries Blood vessels blood vessels can be damaged in four ways crushing

penetrating spasm and stretching

Nerves can also be damaged by crushing penetrating and stretching with

most injuries to nerves occurring with a combination of all three Nerves must

always be tested subsequent to any significant trauma Acute nerve injuries

can be missed therefore it is important to ask the patient if they have

weakness numbness or tingling in the specified area If a nerve injury is

diagnosed always look for associated vascular injury

Classification of nerve injuries

Neurapraxia is a transient loss of function caused by external pressure

or simple contusion and has an early recovery

Axonotmesis is seen classically after dislocations and closed fractures

and is due to severe compression resulting in loss of function Recovery may

take weeks to months New axonal processes grow 1 to 2 mm per day

Neurotmesis is due to complete division of the nerve It has no

recovery unless surgically repaired and function may be adequate post

surgical repair but is rarely normal

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 14 Version 1 2009

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 15: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Muscles are extremely vascular and their blood supply crucial If the musclersquos

blood supply is impeded by compartment syndrome arterial damage or tight

plastersdressings the muscle becomes ischaemic Ischaemic muscle

becomes fibrous tissue This is a major issue in fracture management as

fibrous tissue contracts and pulls the associated joint out of anatomical

alignment Coincidentally muscle crushed by direct force can also become

fibrous tissue which shortens the muscle and hampers joint movement

Lacerated muscle is difficult to repair as sutures will not hold well enough to

stop contraction of the muscle therefore pulling the edges apart

Skin can be damaged by a number of forces as well as direct trauma If a

force is great enough to fracture a bone the skin at the fracture site is bound

to be injured

Ligaments connect bone to bone They provide stability and guidance for

joints Ligaments have enormous tensile strength that can withstand forces of

up to 226 kg before rupturing There are a large number of ligaments in the

body There are four ligaments in the knee alone posterior cruciate anterior

cruciate lateral collateral and medial collateral The three grades of ligament

injuries are

Sprain where stability is maintained

Partial rupture where some fibres remain and there is some loss of

stability

Complete rupture where continuity of the ligament is ruptured and

there is complete loss of stability Some patients may say they heard a

lsquosnaprsquo Pain is severe and bleeding under the skin will cause swelling

and haemarthrosis (only if bleeding occurs into the joint) Most ligament

ruptures can be treated nonoperatively but there are some exceptions

where the ligament needs to be repaired surgically Nursing

management of these patients includes splinting the joint and

coolingice packs

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 15

Tendons connect muscle to bone and permit conduction of force by muscle

to bone which results in joint movement Tendons and ligaments have much

Version 1 2009

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 16: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

lower oxygen consumption than skeletal muscle This low metabolic rate

means that they are slow healing after injury

Strains and sprains A strain is any painful twisting or pulling (wrenching) of a joint It does not tear

ligaments and it may simply be an overstretching or tearing of a muscle A

strain is painful Patients often call strains lsquopulled musclesrsquo A sprain is where

the joint is temporarily twistedbent into an abnormal position Tearing of

ligamentous fibres occurs but the joint will remain stable There is bruising

swelling pain and loss of joint movement These symptoms can vary

depending on the severity of the sprain Nursing management of sprains is

rest ice compression (with firm strappingbandaging) and elevation

Dislocations and subluxations A dislocation is when the articular (joint) surfaces are no longer in contact

and can be described as anteriorposterior or mediallateral A subluxation is

partial displacement of the articular surfaces Both injuries occur when the

joint is forced beyond its anatomical range of motion Symptoms of

dislocations include loss of normal mobility pain change in contour of the

joint and discrepancy with the length of the extremity

Fractures

Bone has some degree of elasticity A fracture results from stressforce

placed on the bone which it cannot absorb It may be caused by direct or

indirect trauma stress or weakness of the bone or may be pathological in

origin The types of force used to cause fractures are direct violence indirect

(generally a twisting injury) pathological (generally a weak bone from tumour

or osteoporotic bone) and fatigue (repeated stress on the bone for example

from military marches)

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 16

Version 1 2009

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 17: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Classification

Fractures are classified as stable or unstable Stable fractures are unlikely to

be displaced whereas unstable fractures are likely to be displaced Fractures

are also classified as open or closed With closed fractures there is no

penetration of the skin by bone Conversely in open fractures the bone

breaches the skin or one of the body cavities or the force that caused the

fracture penetrates the soft tissue

Type

Transverse fractures cross the bone at a 90o angle and are generally stable

post reduction

Obliquespiral fractures are at a 45o angle to the axis usually from a twisting

force causing upward thrust Most long bone fractures are due to violent

twisting motions such as a sharp twist to the leg when the foot is stuck in a

hole producing a spiral fracture

Comminuted fractures are high-energy injuries where the bone is splintered in

more than two fragments These are generally associated with significant soft

tissue injury

Impacted fractures occur when one fragment is forced into another The

fracture line may be difficult to visualise

Crush fractures occur when cancellous bone is compressed or crushed

Avulsion fractures occur when soft tissue and bone are torn away from the

insertion site

Greenstick fractures occur when the compressed cortex bendsbuckles If the

force persists the cortex will fracture These are usually seen in children as

their bones are much more porous and soft

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 17

Epiphyseal or growth plate fractures (Salter-type) may affect future bone

growth because of early closure of the epiphyseal plate and resultant limb

shortening Angulation may occur with partial growth plate fractures because

bone growth continues in the noninjured area

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 18: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 18 Version 1 2009

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 19: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

General Principles of Splinting Indications

To immobilize and stabilize fractures and dislocations as soon as

possible to prevent further soft tissue or bony damage

To decrease pain from impaired neurological function or muscle

spasm

To decrease swelling associated with injury by reducing blood and fluid

loss into the soft tissues

To immobilize injured areas after burns bites and stings

To immobilize an area during the healing of infectious or inflammatory

processes and after the surgical repair of muscles and tendons

Contraindications There are NO absolute contraindications to applying a splint

Cautions

1 Injured extremities should be handled gently minimise movement of

the affected area

2 Bony prominences should be padded to avoid undue pressure and skin

breakdown

3 Joint above and below should be immobilised

4 In general longitudinal traction may be applied while a splint is being

applied except when the injury involves a joint dislocation or open

fracture

5 Align a severely deformed limb so a splint can be applied ndash DO NOT

force an extremity into a splint

6 Avoid zips knots or attachments over the injury site

7 Assess and document neurovascular status before and after splinting

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 19

Version 1 2009

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 20: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splints A splint is any device used to immobilise a fracture or dislocation This may be

an improvised device such as a rolled newspaper cane ironing board stick

or virtually any object that can provide stability it may be the patientrsquos own

body or it may be one of the many commercially available splints such as

wooden splints inflatable splints and traction splints

Splints are divided into four basic types

Soft splints ndash soft non-rigid such as a pillow and crepe bandages

Rigid - Hard splints ndash firm surface rigid such as a board

Pneumatic splints ndash inflatable splint provides rigidity without being

hard

Traction splints ndash provides support capable of maintaining longitudinal

traction for lower extremity fractures

SOFT SPLINT ndash NON-RIGID SPLINTS

Include

- bandaging material

- blankets

- cloth

- cravats

- foam rubber

- pillow

- sling HARD-RIGID AND SEMIRIGID SPLINTS

Include

- Aluminium or other pliable metal - cervical collars

- backboards ndash woodfibre glass plastic

- cardboard

- fibre glass

- wire ladder splints

- leather

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 20

- moulded plastic

Version 1 2009

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 21: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

- plaster

- vacuum

- finger splints

- knee immobilizer PNEUMATIC ndash INFLATABLE SPLINTS

Include

- air splints

- pneumatic antishock garments (PASG) TRACTION SPLINTS

Include

- Donway

- Thomas

- Sager

- Hare

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 21 Version 1 2009

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 22: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

SOFT NON-RIGID SPLINTING

A soft splint is one that has no inherent rigidity such as a pillow or rolled

blanket crepe bandage or sling

PILLOWS BLANKETS and IMPROVISED SOFT SPLINTS

Pillow splints can be fashioned from any soft bulky material that is readily

available

Splinting using a towel in which the towel is rolled up and wrapped around the limb then tied in place

Pillow splint in which the pillow is wrapped around the limb and tied

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 22 Version 1 2009

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 23: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Handwrist pillow splint

BANDAGING

Bandages are used to give support to an injured area or apply pressure to an

area in order to limit swelling Bandages fall into two main categories

1 tubular bandages

2 roll bandages

TUBULAR BANDAGES

Tubular bandages usually are elasticised and come in varying sizes They are

designed to be applied in a double layer

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 23

Version 1 2009

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 24: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

ROLL BANDAGES

Roll bandages are manufactured in various forms and sizes They may be

either stretchable or non-stretchable In addition they may be adherent or non-

adherent Adherent bandages are better for giving support as they do not slip

once applied Non-stretch bandage should not be applied around an injured

limb as any subsequent swelling will cause vascular impairment When

applying a roll bandage around a limb always start distally and work

proximally Generally each turn of bandage should overlap the previous turn

by 23rds

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 24 Version 1 2009

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 25: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

SLINGS

Slings are used to

- support fractures of the clavicle scapula humerus elbow forearm

wrist or hand

- after reduction of dislocated shoulder dislocated elbow or

dislocated digits

- infections of the arm

- support a plaster of Paris cast of the arm or any arm injury

- to reduce swelling of the forearm wrist or hand

- to provide elevation of the arm for any purpose

BROAD ARM SLINGS

Application

Place the long straight side of the sling parallel to the sternum and place the

apex of the sling behind the injured arm Extend the upper end of the sling

over the opposite shoulder Bring the lower end of the sling over the shoulder

of the injured arm Tie the two ends behind the neck Secure the elbow in the

sling using a safety pin for an adult or adhesive tape for a child

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 25 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 26: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 26

Version 1 2009

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 27: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

a) In this method of applying the sling the forearm is supported

from both shoulders by the sling

1 Bend arm at elbow so that little finger is about a hand-

breadth above level of elbow

2 Place one end of triangle over shoulder on injured side

and let sling hang down over chest with base toward

hand and apex toward elbow

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over shoulder on uninjured side

5 Tie the two ends at the neck Knot should be on either

side of neck not in the middle where it could cause

discomfort

6 Draw apex of bandage toward elbow until snug bring it

around to front and fasten with safety pin or adhesive

tape

b) If it is desirable to support the forearm without pressure on the

collarbone or shoulder of the injured side the following steps are

taken

1 Bend arm at elbow

2 Drape upper end of triangle over uninjured shoulder

3 Slip sling between body and arm

4 Carry lower end up over flexed forearm (ends of fingers

should extend slightly beyond base of triangle)

5 Slide lower end of bandage under injured shoulder

between arm and body and secure the two ends with a

knot

6 Draw apex toward elbow until snug and secure with

safety pin or adhesive tape

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 27 Version 1 2009

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 28: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httpuploadwikimediaorgwikipediacommons771Forearm_splintjpg

HIGH ARM SLINGS

This is predominantly used when the hand is injured or infected and needs

dependent drainage

Application

Bend the patientrsquos arm so that the fingers touch the opposite clavicle Apply

the upper side of the sling along and parallel to the upper border of the

patientrsquos forearm and hand so that the sling extends to a little beyond the

elbow on the injured side Tuck the base of the sling well under the injured

forearm and hand Take the lower end of the sling up across the patientrsquos

back and tie it to the end on the injured side Tuck in at the elbow

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 28

Version 1 2009

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 29: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

COLLAR AND CUFF

Used to support an injured shoulder clavicle or upper extremity Collar and

Cuff slings are made of foam surrounded by slightly stretchable soft material

Collar and Cuff can be used to form a variety of slings and braces such as a

balanced arm sling wrist support sling clavicle brace or shoulder immobilizer

The soft foam in its sleeve provides strong but comfortable support when

fastened into position Used in place of traditional slings collar and cuff

provides comfort for the patient without additional padding As a balanced arm

sling collar and cuff provides effective support at the elbow and wrist without

obscuring the affected limb and without applying any force to the injured side

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 29 Version 1 2009

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 30: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

OTHER GENERAL USE RIGID AND SEMI-RIGID SPLINTS

All splints regardless of size adjustability or other unique qualities

are primarily classified by whether or not they are intrinsically formable Fixed

shape splints are defined as rigid and those that can be adjusted to a variety

of shapes as formable or semi-rigid

The most commonly use splints are

Rigid (non-formable)

- board splints (whether made of wood plastic or metal)

- long boards (long spine boards)

Semi ndash Rigid (formable)

- cardboard splints

- wire ladder splints

- SAM splints

- Vacuum splints

Padding is required with any splint whose surface in hard irregular or not

exactly conforming to the external shape of the area to which it is applied

Generally it is easier and better to separate the task of padding the surface of

the splint from that of adding such additional padding as is needed to fill voids

between the splint and the limb Some commercial splints come with foam

padding already attached to their ldquocontactrdquo areas If padding is not pre-

applied layers of gauze combine towels etc can be fixed to any surface that

will contact the patient The thickness of the material that is used to pad the

splint should be sufficient to serve as a shock absorber and to provide firm

localised pressure on any protrusion without interfering with the support and

immobilisation that the splint provides along its length

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 30 Version 1 2009

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 31: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

BOARD SPLINTS

Board splints are long rigid flat rectangles (usually with corners) which

historically were made from thin wooden boards Even though today they are

available in a variety of plastics and lightweight metal alloys they remain

predominantly constructed from lightweight but strong thin plywood

Regardless of the materials from which it is made any flat rigid non-formable

rectangular splint is still called a ldquoboard splintrdquo

Although there is no standard for the length of board splints they are

generally between 8 and 12 cm wide Two approximate lengths which are

commercially available are found to be of general usefulness when splinting

- About 40 cm long for splinting limited areas only such as the upper

arm the forearm wrist and hand or the lower leg

- About 1 metre long for splinting and entire extremity in a straight

extended position

- Tongue blades (spatulas) are useful when individual fingers need to

be splinted in a straight extended position and should be included

in any consideration of board splints

The surface of a board splint which will contact with the patient must be

padded prior to use Some commercial splints include padding over the rigid

surface

Board splints are generally best used when a firm flat rigid splint is

needed such as isolated wrist forearm and hand injuries

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 31 Version 1 2009

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 32: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httpchestofbookscomhealthbodymassageMargaret-D-PalmerLessons-on-Massageimagesfig-117-Fractured-Leg-

Bandaged-to-Back-Splintpng

httpwwwcprfloridanetimagesreferenceSplintsjpg

SEMI ndash RIGID FORMABLE SPLINTS

Aluminium Splints ndash SAM Splints

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 32

The SAM splint is a durable aluminium splint wrapped in hypoallergenic

foam It contains no stays of any type it is universal and can be shaped to be

straight or angled to meet any basic need This malleable material has no

intrinsic rigidity The splint moulds easily is x-ray translucent and contains

padding between its core material and fluid impervious outer shell The SAM

splint is not sufficiently rigid to be used when relatively flat and is dependent

upon the upward bending of its outer edges (forming it into a semi-circle or ldquoUrdquo

across its width) to make it rigid along its length When forming and applying

Version 1 2009

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 33: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

the splint it is essential that a sufficient portion of each side is bent upwards

or the splint may undesirably bend along its length

httpwwwnitro-pakcomimages300120Sam20Splint20Arm-20Leg-200x200jpg

httpwwwmtongilcomgoodsSam20Splintjpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 33

httpwwwsnowdonia-adventurescoukimagesleg_with_fixed_with_splintsjpg

Version 1 2009

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 34: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httpwwwabledatacomproduct_imagesimages01A1109jpg

Wire Ladder Splints Wire ladder splints are made from heavy gauge wire rods formed into a

flat rectangular frame with evenly spaced wire ldquorungsrdquo welded across its width

Their surface can be bent at any angle and any curve that is desired The

ability to form curved areas is an especially useful attribute making them

particularly applicable for fractures with marked deformity They are

sufficiently rigid that they can be used as straight flat splints yet they will

remain in any other shape to which they are bent

Once the wire splint has been formed to the size and shape desired

padding must be secured to any of its surfaces that will lie against the patient

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 34 Version 1 2009

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 35: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httpwwwnexternalcommedtechimageswiresplintWEB1gif

CARDBOARD SPLINTS

Cardboard splints are generally made of either fluid-impervious plastic

impregnated corrugated cardboard or thin corrugated sheets of plastic Even if

made of plastic such thin corrugated splints are defined as cardboard splints

Cardboard splints are purchased and stored as long as long flat

rectangles with rounded corners There is a score (a pressed indentation)

which runs the full length of the splints several inches from each long edge of

the splint Prior to use the splint must be bent at these scores so that the area

outside of each forms a perpendicular side and the splint has a box like

shape with open ends Most commercial cardboard splints also come with

high density foam padding pre-attached to the middle section (or base) of the

splint so that it lies between its two sides

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 35 Version 1 2009

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 36: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httppreparesmartcomMerchant2graphics00000001FA-5400jpg

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 36 Version 1 2009

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 37: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

VACUUM SPLINTS

Vacuum splints are generally thin flat rectangular bags filled with

thousands of small round or multi-faceted plastic beads The splintrsquos outer

covers are sealed and air-proof (also fluid impervious) Somewhere on the

splintrsquos outer surface there is one or more valve stem(s) to allow the

connection of a vacuum pump to evacuate air from within the splint When the

splint contains air as well as the beads the plastic beads can move freely

against each other and the splint can be formed into any needed shape

When the air is evacuated from the splint with the hand pump the beads are

tightly pressed against each other and the splint becomes rigid in the exact

shape to which it has been formed around the extremity or body

Most vacuum splints are x-ray translucent and include Velcro tabs to

assist in holding the splint against the limb until the air has been evacuated

from the splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 37

httpwwwmdimicrotekcomimagesProductPhotos81-A2014ajpg

Version 1 2009

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 38: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

PNEUMATIC SPLINTS - AIR SPLINTS

Air splints are dual walled air-proof plastic sleeves which contain a

closable stem and valve to allow then to be inflated by mouth Although they

are flexible when empty to facilitate storage and installation when inflated

they only assume a completely straight (or straight with a perpendicular foot

section) shape When applied an air splint must always be inflated enough to

make it fully rigid Although the amount or air needed to make it rigid varies

and allows the splint to adjust to the varying girths of the extremity being

splinted the splintrsquos inflated shape can not be varied An air splint can only be

used on an area which is aligned and conforms to the inflated straight (or

straight with its foot perpendicular) shape of the splintrsquos design If any

curvature or angle which is not designed into the splint is present it will be

straightened when the splint is inflated Although non formable the adjustable

girth of most inflatable splints allows each to be used for several applications

Air splints are radiologically transparent (except for the zip) Because

they provide external pneumatic pressure totally around the length of the limb

there is a risk that the circumferential pressure can inadvertently act as a

tourniquet on the underlying and distal circulation Exposure to extreme heat

or direct sunlight for an extended period after the splint has been inflated can

cause expansion of the air in the splint and cause it to tighten around the

extremity Air pressure within the splint is also subject to fluctuations in

altitude making their use in air transport limited

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 38 Version 1 2009

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 39: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

httpwwwambulancevicgovauMediaimagessplints-b9ec9817-9153-4661-bdab-8933664e89e9JPG PASG ndash PNEUMATIC ANTISHOCK GARMENT

The pneumatic antishock garment (PASG) has been used for many years in

the prehospital and Emergency Department setting for the treatment of shock

The mechanism of action of the PASG is controversial The increase in blood

pressure after application of the PASG can be attributed to three affects

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 39 Version 1 2009

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 40: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

increase peripheral vascular resistance enhanced venous return

(autotransfusion) and reduced volume loss from control of haemorrhage

Current indications for use of the PASG are limited In Australia its use

is predominantly limited to the stabilization of pelvic and lower extremity

fractures ie as a pneumaticair splint

By enclosing both the lower extremities and pelvis and by producing

effects similar to a large air splint the garment prevents movement

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 40

Version 1 2009

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 41: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

TRACTION SPLINTS

Traction splints are used to stabilize a fracture of the femur Pulling on

a broken limb draws the bones into line just as a string of beads straightens

when it is pulled at each end Muscular contraction will shorten any limb

unless there is a bone to hold its ends apart and the traction must therefore

be strong enough to overcome the muscle power but not so strong that it

holds the ends apart

They consist of a buttress applied to the ischial tuberosity with metal arms

extending distal to the foot Between the metal bars bandage or straps are

applied to support the weight of the limb

Traction can be applied to the limb in a variety of ways

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 41

httpimgtfdcomGEMgem_0003_0005_0_img0639jpg

Version 1 2009

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 42: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

SKIN TRACTION

Skin traction is applied by means of adhesive strapping stuck directly

onto the skin

Application

(a) one person applies continuous manual traction to the leg

(b) apply a foam traction kit or improvise with non-stretch 75cm

strapping

I With the foot flexed at a right-angle position the spreader

plate 7-10 cm from the sole of the foot and at right-angles

to the leg Ensure that this position is held and that the

foam padding covers the malleoli

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22338amplang=2ampsi=3

httpwwwmolnlyckecomitemaspid=22339

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 42

Version 1 2009

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 43: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

II Measure the length of the strapping required and cut or

fold each strip to this length

III Beginning at the ankle apply one or two turns to hold the

foam padding securely in position Next using firm but

even tension apply the bandage in a ldquofigure of eightrdquo

style from without inwards to retain the leg in a neutral

position It is important that no wrinkles should occur in

the bandage at this stage as pressure areas may

develop If too much tension is applied then constriction

of the blood floe to the foot and ankle may occur

The skin traction can be used in conjunction with the Thomas splint

THOMAS SPLINT The simplest form of fixed traction is a Thomas Splint Originally

devised by Hugh Owen Thomas in the 1800rsquos

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 43

Version 1 2009

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 44: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Uses

- To provide support andor splintage to a femoral fracture

- To reduce internal blood loss and to relieve pain and muscle

spasm

- To provide fixed traction

Procedure

1 Select the size of the ring of the Thomas splint by measuring around

the thigh of the injured leg at the level of the groin and adding 5 cm to

allow for swelling Select the length of the Thomas splint by measuring

the inside of the leg from the groin to the heel and adding 25 cm in

order to permit full plantar flexion of the foot

2 Apply gentle traction to the leg by pulling on the strings of the skin

traction while simultaneously supporting the heel The pull of the cord

must be along the line of the foam extension piece Traction is

maintained until the procedure is completed

3 Pass the splint over the foot and position it comfortably at the groin

4 The length of the splint is covered in a sling either of flannel or tubular

gauze bandage which supports the leg

5 The skin traction strings are attached to the end of the Thomas splint

and tied securely maintaining gentle traction on the leg

6 The leg is then stretched with a Spanish Windlass (nowadays usually

made of two wooden tongue depressors) and the counter pressure

taken by a padded leather ring at the upper end of the splint under the

ischial tuberosity

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 44 Version 1 2009

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 45: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

7 Elevate the end of the Thomas splint

DONWAY SPLINT

The Donway Traction Splint is designed to be fitted to a patient with no

necessity to lift the limb prior to applying traction The detachable ischial ring

is slid under the patient without moving the limb The main frame is then

placed over the leg with the two components locked together The pneumatic

system pushes the loose fitting ischial ring into correct alignment with the

ischium and maintains traction by pushing apart the foot and the ring But

moderate tightening of the ischial strap comfortable support is attained under

the patientrsquos ischium for the duration of traction The design of the ischial ring

prevents force being exerted on the groin area reducing the possibility of

pressure areas

Traction is effected through the use of a pump which allows the force to

be evenly applied on a progressive basis until the desired level is attained

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 45 Version 1 2009

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 46: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

The Donway has been designed to provide a direct linear relationship

between the pneumatic pressure generated and the resulting traction force

being exerted When traction has been achieved the collets are locked and

the air is released from the system

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 46

Version 1 2009

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 47: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Instructions for Use

1 Feed the ischial ring under the knee adjust around the thigh and fasten

the buckle to achieve a loose fit

2 Depress the air release valve to ensure that no excess pressure is

retained in the system

3 Unlock the collets raise the footplate into the upright position and place

the splint over the leg

4 Adjust the side arms of the splint to the desired length attach to the

ischial ring pegs and lock by turning the side arms

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 47 Version 1 2009

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 48: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

5 Open the ankle strap and employing the necessary support place the

patientrsquos heel in the padded portion of the strap with the foot against

the foot plate

6 Maintaining the heel against the foot plate adjust the lower Velcro

attachment to ensure that the padded support member is positioned

high on the ankle

7 Criss-cross the top straps tightly over the instep starting with the

longest strap

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 48 Version 1 2009

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 49: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

8 Tighten the straps around the foot-plate and secure with the Velcro

attachment The ankle strap and footplate are designed to ensure that

when traction is applied the direction of pull is through the axis of the

leg with the pressure being equally applied to the entire surface of the

foot

9 Apply pneumatic pressure with the pump up to the desired level of

traction and upon completion moderately tighten the strap to secure

the ring in the ischial load bearing position

The operating range of the splint is 10-14 lbs traction Safety pressure

relief valves automatically operate if this range is exceeded in this

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 49 Version 1 2009

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 50: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

event the collets should be locked the air released and the normal

procedure for application of traction repeated

If the limb is badly displaced by the fracture it is recommended that

slow manual traction be used to align the leg which should be

adequately supported Application of pneumatic traction will complete

the re-alignment of the leg and ensure that traction is maintained along

the osteal line The application of equal pneumatic pressure in both

arms of the splint ensures correct fitment of the ring to the ischium

Fine manual adjustment can be made where required

10 Align the opened leg supports with the calf and thigh Feed the leading

tapered edge under the leg over the top of the frame of the opposite

side arm and back under the leg

Adjust the tension to provide the required support and secure with the

button fastener

11 Feed the knee strap under the leg and secure above the knee with the

buckle fastener

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 50 Version 1 2009

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 51: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

12 As the injured leg is under traction and adequately supported the heel

stand can be raised Recheck the traction level and adjust where

necessary

13 Turn the collets until hand tight and apply a further quarter turn to lock

the position of the side arms and release the pneumatic pressure by

depressing the air release valve until the gauge reads zero The patient

can now be moved

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 51 Version 1 2009

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 52: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

OTHER TRACTION SPLINTS Hare Traction Splint

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 52

Version 1 2009

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 53: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Pelvic SlingsSplints

Patients with unstable pelvic fractures from high-energy mechanisms like

pedestrian versus motor vehicle or a fall from a great height are at high risk of

fatality from major blood loss Understanding the anatomy of the pelvis and

surrounding structures and the types of pelvic fractures that can occur can in

the recognition and stabilization of a pelvic fracture There are several

methods to stabilize a fractured pelvis but all share the goal of stabilization

and reduction

Anatomy and Function

The function of the pelvis is to bear weight The weight of the upper body is

borne by the pelvis and distributed to the legs when a person is standing or to

the ischium when a person is sitting The pelvis also protects major blood

vessels and organs in the lower abdominal cavity including parts of the

digestive urinary and reproductive systems The pelvis is the attachment

point for numerous muscles that connect the legs to the body The actions of

walking running standing and many other functions involve movement of an

intact and stable pelvis

The pelvis is a ring of paired bones that is the attachment point between the

upper and lower skeleton The pelvic ring is formed by pairs of fused bones

The pelvis includes the sacral section of the spinal cord in the posterior

Attached to each side of the sacrum is an ilium the top of which is known as

the iliac crest On the anterior portion of the pelvis are the pubis and the

ischium The two pubis bones are connected by the symphysis pubis

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 53

Many organs and blood vessels pass through or near the bones of the pelvis

including the bladder urethra end of the large intestine and internal

reproductive organs Large blood vessels located in the pelvic ring can be the

source of severe bleeding and large amounts of blood from uncontrolled

haemorrhage can accumulate in the free space around the pelvis The right

and left iliac arteries descending from the aorta are located in the pelvis

Blood returns from the lower extremities via the right and left iliac veins Major

Version 1 2009

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 54: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

blood vessels also supply the tissue bones and organs in the pelvic ring

Blood loss can also originate from bony fracture surfaces and surrounding soft

tissue injuries Uncontrolled bleeding is the leading cause of death for patients

with a complex pelvic fracture

Mechanisms of Injury

Primary mechanisms of injury for pelvic fracture often involve large amounts

of energy andor mass A motor-vehicle collision motorcycle crash or even a

downhill skiing accident are examples of high-force and high-speed collisions

Falls from height such as a construction worker falling from a roof or a rock

climber falling from a cliff may result in pelvic fracture Crushing injuries can

also apply sufficient force to the body to cause a pelvic fracture

Pelvic ring fractures can be caused by different types of forces such as lateral

or anteroposterior compression and vertical shear forcing Vertical shearing is

likely from a fall lateral compression is the most common type of force that

can cause a pelvic fracture since force is applied to the body from the side

as in a side-impact motor-vehicle collision

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 54 Version 1 2009

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 55: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

With anteroposterior compression force is applied from front to back which is

typical in a head-on motor-vehicle collision

An iliac crest fracture which is a fracture to the upper wing of the ilium may

present with localized pain tenderness and bruising but it is a relatively

stable injury that is less likely to threaten adjacent organs or blood vessels

While this might be painful and show instability during a physical exam the

pelvic ring is intact This type of pelvic fracture is isolated and stable and the

life threat is low

A pelvic ring fracture which can occur in any of the locations where the

separate bones fuse together is a very serious injury that could involve

significant blood loss and internal organ damage For example a separation

could occur between the ilium and sacrum or between the two pubis bones

or multiple separations could occur The pelvic ring is more likely to separate

in two or more places than in just one

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 55

Any fracture of the pelvic ring is much more complex because of the amount

of free space for internal bleeding and the damage that separated bone ends

can cause to blood vessels and organs A pelvic ring fracture is sometimes

Version 1 2009

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 56: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

called an open book fracture due to the now open appearance of the

previously closed and stable pelvic ring

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 56 Version 1 2009

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 57: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Stabilization

Stabilization of a suspected pelvic fracture is an important treatment

Continued movement of an unstable pelvic fracture can cause further injury

damage and blood loss Early control of life-threatening bleeding is the

primary goal of emergency treatment

The treatment goal is to reduce and stabilize a fractured pelvis It is theorized

that a circumferential pelvic sheet wrap or mechanical device applies

compression so there is less potential space for blood to accumulate in the

pelvic cavity puts pressure against or tamponades bleeding sources such

as fractured bony surfaces or ruptured vessels reduces instability of the

injured pelvis that could cause further damage to tissue organs bony

surfaces and blood vessels and reduces the patientrsquos pain by limiting

movement of the pelvis

A variety of methods are available to stabilize an injured pelvis One of the

remaining accepted uses for MAST trousers or pneumatic antishock garments

has been for pelvic fracture stabilization Other methods that are becoming

more popular include use of a standard hospital draw sheet to create a pelvic

sheet wrap the SAM Sling and the Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-

POD All of these methods apply circumferential compression to ldquoclose the

bookrdquo

Sheet Wrap

Following are the recommended steps for applying a pelvic sheet wrap After

identifying an unstable pelvis fold the sheet smoothly (do not roll the sheet)

place the sheet under the patientrsquos pelvis so it is centered over the greater

trochanters where the head of the femur attaches to the pelvis On exam you

can palpate the bony prominence of the femur In the supine position the

patientrsquos greater trochanter is often even with the space between his distal

wrist and the base of the thumb Wrap and twist the two running ends of the

sheet around the patientrsquos pelvis Once tightened cross the running ends and

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 57 Version 1 2009

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 58: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

tie or clamp them to maintain tension Individuals must use their judgment

regarding the correct amount of pressure

Pelvic stabilization sheet wrap

The SAM Sling

The intention of the SAM Sling is to reduce and stabilize an unstable pelvic

injury It can be quickly applied at the accident scene or in the emergency

department Early application is recommended to reduce the risk of severe

life-threatening bleeding Its main design feature is a buckle that engages

when a set amount of pressure is applied The SAM Sling is padded for

comfort and can stay on patients during x-ray

The SAM Sling is applied by placing the sling underneath the patient at the

level of the buttocks and aligned with the greater trochanters and symphysis

pubis The sling is then closed and the buckle is tensioned to apply force in

both directions

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 58

The SAM Sling

Version 1 2009

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 59: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

The T-POD

The T-POD is another device for emergency stabilization of a pelvic fracture

According to the manufacturer it can ldquohelp prevent blood loss during patient

transport and aid in pain controlrdquo

The T-POD is applied to a supine patient by first sliding the support binder

under the small of the patientrsquos back and then under the pelvis A pulley

system attached to the binder is used to tension the system

The Traumatic Pelvic Orthotic Device or T-POD

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 59 Version 1 2009

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 60: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

The SAM Sling The SAM Sling is the current device for pelvic immobilisation used by

Ambulance Victoria

Instructions for use Step 1 Unfold the Sling with the white surface face up

Step 2 Place white side of Sling beneath patient at level of buttocks (greater

trochanterssymphysis pubis)

Step 3 Firmly close Sling by placing black Velcro side of flap down on blue surface of

Sling Fold back material as needed Try to place buckle close to midline

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 60 Version 1 2009

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 61: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Step 4 Grab orange handle on outer surface of flap and release from flap by pulling

upward

Step 5 With or without assistance pull both orange handles in opposite directions to

tighten Sling

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 61

Version 1 2009

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 62: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Step 6 Keep pulling until you hear the buckle click and feel free handle stop

Step 7 As soon as the free handle stops maintain tension and firmly press the

orange handle against the blue surface of the Sling

Step 8 To remove Sling lift orange handle next to flap and release Velcro by pulling

upward Maintain tension and slowly allow Sling to loosen

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 62 Version 1 2009

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 63: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Step 9 Do not cut to remove Release orange pull handle in order to remove

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 63 Version 1 2009

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 64: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Clinical Practice Guidelines and

Competency Assessment Tools

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 64

Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 65: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 65 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 66: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 66 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 67: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 67 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 68: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 68 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 69: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 69 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 70: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 70 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 71: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 71 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 72: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 72 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 73: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 73 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 74: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 74 Version 1 2009

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 75: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 75 Version 1 2009

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 76: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

References and Suggested Further Reading Bache J Armitt C amp Gadd C Practical Procedures in the Emergency Department London1998 Mosby Buttman A Martin S Vomacka R amp McSwain N Comprehensive Guide to Prehospital Skills St Louis 1996 Mosby Yearbook Curtis K Ramsden C amp Friendship J (Eds) Emergency and Trauma Nursing Sydney 2007 Mosby ndash Elsevier Frakes MA amp Evans T Major Pelvic Fractures Critical Care Nurse Vol 24 No 2 April 2004 pp 18-30 McSwain N Frame S amp Salome J (Eds) PHTLS Basic and Advanced Prehospital Trauma Life Support 5th Edition St Louis 2003 Mosby Meredith R amp Butcher J D

Field Splinting of Suspected Fractures Preparation Assessment and Application The Physician and Sportsmedicine Vol 25 No 10 Oct 1997 Proehl JA (Ed) Emergency Nursing Procedures 3rd Edition St Louis 2004 Saunders Roberts Clinical Procedures in Emergency Medicine 4th Edition 2004 WB Saunders Philadelphia Semonin-Holleran R (Ed) Air and Surface Patient Transport ndash Principles and Practice 3rd Edition 2003 Mosby Inc St Louis Chapter 18 pp 305-319

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 76 Version 1 2009

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009

Page 77: Splinting and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Final 2

Simpson T Krieg JC Heuer F Bottlang M Stabilization of pelvic ring disruptions with a circumferential sheet J Trauma-Inj Infect Crit Care 52(1)158ndash161 2002

Splinting Bandaging and Immobilization Techniques and Devices Page 77 Version 1 2009